- Manuals
- Brands
- Sony
- Desktop
- PCV-E308DS
- User's Guide
Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide PDF
Summary of Content for Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide PDF
Notice to Users 1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in whole or in part without written permission is prohibited. All rights reserved. This manual and the software described herein, in whole or in part, may not be reproduced, translated, or reduced to any machine-readable form without prior written approval.
SONY ELECTRONICS INC. PROVIDES NO WARRANTY WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN AND HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH REGARD TO THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE, OR SUCH OTHER INFORMATION. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ELECTRONICS INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON TORT, CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS MANUAL, THE SOFTWARE, OR OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN OR THE USE THEREOF.
Sony Electronics Inc. reserves the right to make any modification to this manual or the information contained herein at any time without notice. The software described herein may also be governed by the terms of a separate user license agreement.
Sony, VAIO, VAIO Smart, i.Link, S-Link, and the VAIO logo are trademarks of Sony. Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation. K56flex is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Inc. and Rockwell International. All other trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners.
Safety Information
Owner's Record
The model number and serial number are located on the back of your Sony computer. Record the model and serial numbers in the space provided here. Refer to the model and serial number when you call your Sony Service Center.
Model Number:________________________
Serial Number:________________________
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose your Sony computer to rain or moisture.
Never install modem or telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations
Never touch uninsulated telephone wire or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using the modem during an electrical storm.
Do not use the modem or a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.
Regulatory Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,Page 1
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.
Only peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals, printers, etc.) that comply with FCC Class B limits may be attached to this computer product. Operation with non-compliant peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and television reception.
All cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded and grounded. Operation with cables, connected to peripherals, that are not shielded and grounded, may result in interference to radio and television reception.
FCC Part 68
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. The ringer equivalence number (REN) and the FCC registration number are printed on the modem board. If requested, this information must be supplied to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the phone line. Excessive REN's on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the REN's should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total REN's, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
This modem uses the USOC RJ-11 telephone jack.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will, when practical, notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operations of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will notify you in advance, in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this modem, for repair or warranty information, please contact 1-888-4SONY-PC, or write to the Sony Customer Information Center, One Sony Drive, Park Ridge, NJ 07656.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone-company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
Repair of the modem should be made only by a Sony Service Center or Sony authorized agent. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unlessPag 2
such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.
In order to program this information into your facsimile, see your fax software documentation.
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.
Page 3
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 4
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 5
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 6
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 7
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 8
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 9
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 10
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 11
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 12
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 13
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 14
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 15
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 16
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 17
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 18
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 19
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 20
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 21
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 22
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 23
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 24
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 25
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 26
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 27
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 28
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 29
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 30
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 31
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 32
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 33
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 34
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 35
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 36
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 37
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 38
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 39
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 40
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 41
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 42
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 43
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 44
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 45
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 46
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 47
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 48
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 49
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 50
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 51
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 52
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 53
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 54
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 55
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 56
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 57
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 58
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 59
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 60
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 61
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 62
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 63
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 64
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 65
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 66
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 67
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 68
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 69
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 70
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 71
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 72
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 73
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 74
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 75
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 76
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 77
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 78
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 79
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 80
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 81
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 82
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 83
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 84
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 85
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 86
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 87
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 88
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 89
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 90
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 91
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 92
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 93
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 94
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 95
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 96
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 97
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 98
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 99
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 100
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 101
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 102
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 103
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 104
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 105
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 106
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 107
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 108
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 109
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 110
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 111
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 112
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 113
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 114
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 115
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 116
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 117
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 118
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 119
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 120
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 121
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 122
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 123
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 124
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 125
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 126
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 127
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 128
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 129
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 130
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 131
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 132
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 133
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 134
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 135
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 136
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 137
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 138
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 139
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 140
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 141
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 142
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 143
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 144
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 145
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 146
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 147
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 148
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 149
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 150
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 151
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 152
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 153
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 154
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 155
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 156
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 157
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 158
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 159
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 160
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 161
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 162
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 163
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 164
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 165
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 166
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 167
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 168
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 169
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 170
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 171
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 172
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 173
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 174
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 175
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 176
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 177
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 178
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 179
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 180
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 181
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 182
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 183
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 184
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 185
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 186
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 187
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 188
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 189
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 190
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 191
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 192
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 193
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 194
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 195
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 196
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 197
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 198
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 199
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 200
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 201
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 202
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 203
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 204
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 205
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 206
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 207
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 208
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 209
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 210
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 211
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 212
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 213
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 214
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 215
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 216
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 217
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 218
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 219
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 220
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 221
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 222
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 223
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 224
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 225
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 226
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 227
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 228
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 229
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 230
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 231
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 232
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 233
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 234
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 235
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 236
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 237
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 238
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 239
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 240
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 241
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 242
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 243
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 244
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 245
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 246
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 247
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 248
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 249
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 250
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 251
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 252
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 253
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 254
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 255
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 256
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 257
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 258
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 259
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 260
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 261
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 262
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 263
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 264
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 265
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 266
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 267
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 268
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 269
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 270
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 271
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 272
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 273
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 274
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 275
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 276
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 277
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 278
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 279
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 280
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 281
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 282
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 283
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 284
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 285
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 286
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 287
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 288
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 289
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 290
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 291
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 292
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 293
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 294
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 295
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 296
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 297
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 298
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 299
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 300
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 301
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 302
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 303
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 304
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 305
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 306
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 307
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 308
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 309
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 310
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 311
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 312
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 313
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 314
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 315
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 316
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 317
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 318
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 319
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 320
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 321
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 322
Read Me First
Welcome
Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
Features
For a complete description of the specifications of your VAIO MicroTower, see Specifications.
Exceptional performance: Your MicroTower includes a fast Intel Pentium II processor, a DVD-ROM drive, and a V.90 compatible data/fax modem.1
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD): This new optical storage technology provides increased storage capacity and a rich multimedia computing experience. Your DVD-ROM drive plays both DVD-ROM and CD-ROM discs.
VAIO Smart Keyboard: Your MicroTower includes a USB keyboard with programmable shortcut buttons to launch your favorite programs or access the Internet.
Sony audio and video quality: High-fidelity positional 3D audio system (A3D ), high-powered 3D graphics (AGP), and "Sony-Tuned" MPEG2 digital video playback enable you to take advantage of today's advanced multimedia applications, games, and entertainment software.
S-Link (Control A1) connector: Store and play CDs from your CD changer. Record music to your minidisc recorder. Create libraries of titles with song names and play times, select recording lists from the library to play, edit, or record.
i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors: Connect a digital video camera, such as the Sony Digital Handycam, or other digital imaging devices to an i.LINK connector on either the front or back of your system. This state-of-the-art technology allows audio/video devices to function as true multimedia peripherals, creating a new interface technology between your computer and A/V products.
S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output connector: Transfer digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc recorder. Listen to high quality, multichannel DVD sound when your VAIO MicroTower is connected to a compatible Dolby Digital (AC-3) decoder.
Digital Studio Software: Enjoy all of your computer's audio and video capabilities with component-like applications that allow you to creatively manipulate digital still images, video clips, and audio tracks.
50 free hours of Internet access: Use the Internet for up to 50 free hours when you sign up with GTE (no credit card required). Limit of two hours per day. Free access expires after 50 hours or 90 days after signing up--whichever occurs first.
Preinstalled software titles: All the software on your computer is preinstalled, configured, and ready for you to use right out of the box.
Windows 98: Your system includes the latest operating system from Microsoft.
VAIO Space: Sony's original navigation utility helps simplify the use of applications on your computer.
Communications: Access popular online services, browse the Internet, send faxes, and more.
Unpacking Your Computer
Computer and Supplied Accessories Page 323
Manuals
Read Me First (this manual) contains features and specifications of your VAIO MicroTower. It also includes information on how to contact software vendors and last minute troubleshooting tips.
The VAIO MicroTower User Guidedescribes how to set up your computer, find help, and accomplish basic computer tasks.
The Microsoft Windows98 Getting Started manual explains how to use the basic features of the Windows operating system.
Recovery CDs
System Recovery CD(s)
Application Recovery CD(s)
Other
Setting up your VAIO MicroTower (poster)
Packet containing special product offers
Software Library
The Software Library contains the Microsoft software license agreement, Sony end-user license agreement, and the following CDs:
Adobe PhotoDeluxe Home Edition 3.0
Gremlin Interactive Ltd. MotorHead
Microsoft Encarta 98 Encyclopedia
Microsoft Money/Microsoft Works Page 324
DVD Discs
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Back Panel Overview
The back panel of your computer contains the connectors where you plug in supplied and optional accessories. The icons on the back panel serve as a map to help you locate the connectors on your computer.
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. i.LINK connectors on the back of your system are 6-pin connectors.
Front Panel Overview
The front panel of your MicroTower allows for access to the diskette and DVD-ROM drives. It also includes USB and i.LINK ports that allow you to connect USB devices, CD changers, minidisc editors, or other components.
Page 325
For your convenience, your computer includes USB and i.LINK connectors on both the front and back panels, allowing you to connect to either set of connectors. The i.LINK connector on the front of your system is a 4-pin connector.
Supplementary Information
You can access the online version of Read Me First from the Help Center in VAIO Space.
Optimal DVD Performance
Due to nonstandard implementation of Microsoft Active Movie components in some DVD game titles, some DVD game titles may not play correctly. DVD standards are still evolving. Some DVD titles may require software or hardware components that were not available when your VAIO MicroTower was designed and manufactured.
The DVD Control Panel can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere in the DVD video window and selecting Panel.
If you select the standby mode for your monitor and allow the system to turn off the monitor, it is recommended that you restart your computer before playing DVD titles.
VAIO Smart Keyboard Default Settings
The VAIO Smart Keyboard programmable buttons come with the following applications as their default settings: Page 326
S1 - Easy Internet Access Browser
S2 - Outlook 98 (E-mail)
S3 - MotorHead (Game)
S4 - Microsoft Works
S5 - Quicken Basic 98
S6 - Sony Help Center
All six buttons are reprogrammable.
Using The Standby Mode
To Put Your Computer into Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. There are four ways to put your computer into standby mode.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
Click Shut Down at the bottom of the Start menu to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box. Select Stand by, and then click OK.
Press the Standby button on the VAIO Smart Keyboard (the half moon icon).
Change the timer settings for standby mode in the Control Panel, as follows:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and click Control Panel.
2. Click the Power Management icon.
3. On the Power Schemes tab, change the Power scheme to Home/Office Desk.
4. In the list box for System standby, select an interval of time.
5. Click the OK button and close the Control Panel.
To Resume from Standby Mode
There are two ways to resume system functionality when your computer is in standby mode. You can use any one of the following methods.
Press any key, such as the Enter key.
Tap the power switch on the front panel.
It may take up to 30 seconds for your system to recover stored information and resume functionality. The screen remains blank while the system is resuming functionality.
Applications That Use the TWAIN Driver
Digital imaging applications, such as Adobe PhotoDeluxe, allow you to transfer images to your computer from external devices, including scanners or digital cameras. For some devices, a TWAIN driver window appears on the screen. Always close the TWAIN driver window before exiting or minimizing a digital imaging application.
Restoring Outlook 98
For the Add New Components functionality to be available with Microsoft Outlook, you must first run the installation program for Outlook from the Application Recovery CD. When prompted to install the program, select Exit. This decompresses the software, making the Add New Components functionality available.
If you restore Outlook 98 from the Application Recovery CD and wish to use its fax capability, youPage 327
should follow these steps after restoring Outlook:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar.
2. Point to Settings and click Control Panel.
3. Click Add/Remove Programs.
4. Double-click Microsoft Outlook 98.
5. Click the Add New Components button.
6. Click the Install from CD button. You do not need to insert a CD. The contents of Outlook 98 have already been downloaded to your hard disk drive.
7. In the dialog box that reads "Active Setup is about to determine what internet components are installed on your computer," click the Yes button.
8. Check the box next to "Symantec WinFax Starter Edition."
9. Click the Next button.
10. Click the Install Now button.
11. When the installation is complete, click the OK button.
12. Click Yes to restart your computer.
Sending and Receiving Faxes Using Microsoft Outlook
If you wish to use Microsoft Outlook to send and receive faxes, you must complete the Internet Connection Wizard the first time you use Outlook. To complete this Wizard, you need to supply your name, your e-mail address, and your incoming and outgoing mail servers.
When you launch Outlook, the Internet Connection Wizard displays. Follow the on-screen instructions. When the Symantec WinFax Starter Edition Setup Wizard appears, follow the on screen instructions. On the Auto Receive panel, select the checkbox for Automatic receive fax. To select the modem that ships with your VAIO computer, select Sony Internal Modem on the Modem panel. Click the Properties button to confirm the correct modem properties. When this is complete, click the OK button. When you complete the Modem Configuration Wizard panel, a successful configuration message displays.
The Registration Wizard screen appears on your screen. After you register, Outlook launches. You must close and restart Outlook before you can send or receive faxes.
If you experience difficulties completing this process, call Sony Online Support at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972), before canceling out of the setup process.
Inserting Add-in Boards
Your VAIO MicroTower accommodates PCI add-in boards up to 7.7 inches in length.
Using Devices Connected to the i.LINK (IEEE-1394), S-Link (Control A1), and S/PDIF Optical Digital Audio Output Connectors
For the latest information on devices known to be compatible with the state-of the-art audio, video, and graphics capabilities of your VAIO computer, check the Sony web site at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
Connecting to i.LINK Ports
Your VAIO computer includes a 4-pin i.LINK connector on the front of the system and two 6-pin i.LINK connectors on the back of the system. A 6-pin i.LINK connector can supply power from the computer to the connected device if the device is equipped with a 6-pin connector. A 4-pin i.LINK connector cannot supply power to a connected device.
Page 328
Capturing and Editing Digital Video Images
You can capture digital video images using a digital video camera recorder and DVgate Motion software. Once the images are saved as AVI files, they can be edited using DVgate Motion, DVgate Clip, or Adobe Premiere LE. You cannot capture digital video images directly using the Capture menu in Adobe Premiere LE. Adobe Premiere LE supports an analog capture board for capturing images. Your VAIO computer is designed for digital video input.
If there is no audio data associated with an AVI file, the message "Codec compression error" appears. If you do not wish to associate audio with your AVI file, you can add muted sound data by recording audio with the mute option enabled.
For best performance, when editing AVI files in Adobe Premiere LE, you should use the default setup parameters that shipped with your system. If you change the default setup and want to reinitialize the parameters, follow these steps:
1. In the Adobe Premiere LE application, select Compression from the Make menu. The Compression Settings dialog box appears.
2. In the Method list box, select Sony DV software CODEC.
3. Click OK to close the screen.
4. From the Create menu, select Preset. The Preset dialog box appears.
5. Select the parameters for Time Base, Compress, Output, and Preview Option settings as indicated below.
[Time base]
Time base - 29.97fps (required)
[Compress]
File type - AVI (required)
Compress Program Method - Sony DV software CODEC (required)
Compress Program Depth - Millions colors (No other options)
Quality (No control for this item)
Option: Frames per second - 30 (required)
Option: Basic Key Frames (No control for this item)
Option: Optimize Still Off (recommended)
Data rate - Recompress Off (recommended)
[Output options]
Video - On (required)
Video Size - 720x480
Video VH Ratio - Off (required)
VideoType - Field 2 (recommended)
Audio - On (required)
Audio Rate - 44kHz (required)
Audio Format - 16 Bit Stereo or 16 Bit Monaural (required)
Audio Type - Uncompress (required) Page 329
Audio Interleave - 1 frame (recommended)
- Less than 30 frames (required)
Audio Sync - 1.0 (required)
Audio Skew - 0.75 (recommended)
- Less than 1.0 (required)
[Preview Option]
Preview Window Size - 360x240 (180x120)
Note that Adobe Premiere LE does not save the Preview Window Size, but uses a default size of 320 x 213 each time the application launches. We recommend that you change this setting to 360 x 240 to improve the quality of preview images when editing AVI files.
Using Alternate Browsers with America Online
To use Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator as your browser with America Online, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, point to Settings and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Internet icon.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Click the "Connect to the Internet using local area network" radio button.
5. Click OK.
Using DVgate Motion
When capturing images:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, since this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
The maximum length of AVI files that you can record is approximately 9 minutes 30 seconds.
You can record stereo audio (stereo 1) while capturing video. You cannot add audio on the stereo 2 track after capturing the video data.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. You should perform a separate capture for each audio mode you wish to use.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
Title data is saved in the flash memory of a digital video camera and is not transferred to tape by DVgate Motion.
To avoid interruption of capture sessions, you should disable the screen saver.
The drop frame compensation feature does not provide accurate compensation adjustments for tapes recorded in LP mode.
For tapes that include a mixture of both SP and LP mode, the information displayed by the capture progress indicator may not be accurate.
Make sure the video head of your digital video device is properly cleaned. Anomalies that you see in captured data could be due to dust or other particles on the video head.
o The last frame captured is one frame before your selected [OUT] point. The frame you see immediately after clicking the [OUT] button is not captured. Page 330
When recording AVI files to tape:
Do not use DVgate Motion when the connected digital video peripheral is in Timer Recording mode, as this could produce a malfunction in the peripheral.
o You can record only AVI files. MPEG files cannot be recorded.
To avoid recording problems, such as a single frame appearing in multiple frames, close other applications on your system while recording.
You cannot use different audio modes on the same tape. If you have AVI files that use different audio modes, they cannot be recorded at the same time, but must be recorded separately.
Do not attempt to work with AVI files that are smaller than 4 MB.
DVgate Motion does not support hard disk compression. You should not use disk compression if you are planning to work with DVgate Motion.
In order to maximize recording capabilities, video and audio data are not available while you are recording.
If DVgate Motion indicates that frames have been dropped, you should try closing all open applications, or you may need to defragment your hard drive.
Restoring Audio Drivers
When you restore the audio drivers from the Application Recovery CD, you need to restart your system to use these drivers. In the Add New Hardware wizard that appears when you restart, click the Next button until you are prompted for the location of the drivers. The audio drivers are located on the Application Recovery CD in G:\drivers\audio\AL98091701\English.
Using AC-3 to S/PDIF Output
Minidisc player/recorders, DAT player/recorders, and older digital receivers do not support Dolby Digital (AC-3). You should not use the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option unless you are using a device that supports Dolby Digital. Please refer to the manual supplied with your equipment to determine if it supports Dolby Digital. If you are unsure and you have selected the AC-3 to S/PDIF Output option, turn down the volume on your equipment before using the DVD Player.
For Answers to Your Software Questions
Sony Service Center
For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
Acrobat Reader, Adobe PhotoDeluxe, Adobe Premiere LE
(Adobe Systems Incorporated)
Web site http://www.adobe.com/ phone 206-628-2746 (fee-based support) fax 206-628-5737 e-mail techdocs@adobe.com hours M-F, 6 AM-5 PM PT
America Online (America Online)
Web site http://www.aol.com/ phone 800-827-3338 hours 7 days a week, 6 AM - 2 PM ET
CompuServe (CompuServe Interactive, Inc.)
Web site http://www.compuserve.com/ phone 800-848-8990 hours M-F, 8 AM - 1 PM ET, S-S 10 AM - 10 PM ET
Dr. Solomon's AntiVirus (Dr. Solomon's Software Inc.) Page 331
Web site http://www.drsolomon.com/ phone 888-377-6566 e-mail support@us.drsolomon.com hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Easy Internet Access (Encompass, Inc.)
Web site http://www.encmpss.com/ phone 800-927-3000 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
MotorHead (Gremlin Interactive Ltd.)
Web site http://www.gremlin.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972) hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
Windows 98 Operating System, Works, Money, Encarta, Internet Explorer (Microsoft Corporation)
Web site http://www.microsoft.com/support/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Netscape Communicator (Netscape Communications Corporation)
Web site http://www.netscape.com/ phone 888-4SONYPC (888-476-6972)1
hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day 1 Support from 1-888-4SONYPC is free of charge for 90 days after the original date of purchase.
Quicken Basic (Intuit Inc.)
Web site http://www.intuit.com/support/ phone 900-555-4688 hours 7 days a week, 24 hours a day
SHORT cinema journal (2014 Corporation)
Web site http://www.dvdmags.com/ phone 310-821-9843 fax 310-821-7846 e-mail my2cents@dvdmags.com hours M-F, 9 AM - 5 PM PT
Specifications Model PCV-E302DS PCV-E308DS Processor 350 MHz Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II
Hard Disk Drive 10.2 GB 13.6 GB
Standard SDRAM 64 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB 128 MB SDRAM, expandable to 256 MB Video RAM8 MB SDRAM MPEG "Sony Tuned" MPEG2 Digital Video supports full-screen video and DVD playback Graphics 3D AGP graphics acceleration (Matrox) Sound Capabilities Dynamic High Fidelity 3D PCI Audio (Aureal) Diskette Drive 3.5" 1.44 MB FDD
DVD-ROM Drive Reads DVD data from 2X to 5X variable transfer rate.1
Reads CD data from 10X to 24X variable transfer rate. Modem V.90 compatible data/fax modem2
Expansion Capabilities One PCI slot One hard disk drive bay
Connection Capabilities (Front) USB port i.LINK port (4-pin)
Connection Capabilities (Rear) Optional Keyboard (PS/2-style) Mouse (PS/2-style) USB port
Page 332
Serial port Parallel (printer) Game/MIDI Headphones Line In Microphone VGA Monitor S-Link (ControlA1) S/PDIF Digital Audio Out Video Out S Video Out Two i.LINK ports (6-pin)3
Modem line (RJ-11) Phone line (RJ-11)
Supplied Accessories VAIO Smart keyboard Sony two-button mouse RJ-11 phone cable Power cord Service 90-day limited express service. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Limited Warranty 90-day parts/labor standard. Extendible to one year from original date of purchase upon registration4
Power Requirements 200 watts maximum Dimensions 7" (w) x 12" (h) x 13 3/4" (d) (178mm x 304mm x 330mm) Weight 17 lbs. (7.71 kg) Operating Temperature 50 F to 95 F (+10 C to 35 C)
1 Data on a DVD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 2X at the innermost track to 5X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 1385 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is either 3.3X (4616 kbytes/s) or 3.4X (4709 kbytes/s), depending on your specific system. Data on a CD-ROM disc is read at a variable transfer rate, ranging from 10X at the innermost track to 24X at the outermost track (the data transfer standard 1X rate is 150 kbytes/s). The average data transfer rate is 17X (2550 kbytes/s).
2 Maximum speed for faxing is 14.4 kbps. Your modem is capable of downloading at 56 kpbs using K56flex Technology or V.90. Your phone service, online service, or Internet Service Provider however, may not support this technology or operate at this speed.
3 Six-pin i-LINK connectors on the rear of the system each supply 10V to 12V. The combined total wattage that can be supplied by the two connectors is 6 watts.
4 Certain restrictions apply
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVD discs to indicate what type of player can play the discs. Unless a number or "ALL" appears on your DVD disc or on the packaging, you cannot play the disc on this player.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
This product meets the standards of the International Energy Star Program for energy efficiency.
1998 Sony Electronics Inc. Reproduction in w hole or in part w ithout w ritten permission is prohibited. All rights reserved.
1 Actual upload and download speeds may vary due to line conditions, ISP support, and government regulations.
Page 333
Welcome Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
About the User Guide
The User Guide offers a quick introduction and reference to your Sony computer.
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower shows you how to connect the standard components of your system--generally in under 15 minutes. This section also explains how to connect additional components, such as a printer, MIDI instrument, joystick, digital camera, and more.
Getting Help explains the support options available to you, shows you how to use the Sony Online Support service, and offers basic troubleshooting tips.
Computer Basics shows new computer users how to use a mouse, keyboard, DVD-ROM, and diskette drive.
Other Information provides facts and advice about using your computer.
Limited Warranty Statement provides your product warranty statement and explains how to extend your warranty for an additional nine months.
Page 334
Welcome Congratulations on your purchase of the Sony VAIO MicroTower Computer. Sony has combined leading-edge technology in audio, video, computing, and communications to provide you with state-of-the-art personal computing.
About the User Guide
The User Guide offers a quick introduction and reference to your Sony computer.
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower shows you how to connect the standard components of your system--generally in under 15 minutes. This section also explains how to connect additional components, such as a printer, MIDI instrument, joystick, digital camera, and more.
Getting Help explains the support options available to you, shows you how to use the Sony Online Support service, and offers basic troubleshooting tips.
Computer Basics shows new computer users how to use a mouse, keyboard, DVD-ROM, and diskette drive.
Other Information provides facts and advice about using your computer.
Limited Warranty Statement provides your product warranty statement and explains how to extend your warranty for an additional nine months.
Page 335
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 336
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 337
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 338
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 339
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 340
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 341
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 342
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 343
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 344
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 345
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 346
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 347
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 348
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 349
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 350
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 351
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 352
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 353
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 354
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 355
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 356
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 357
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 358
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 359
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 360
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 361
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 362
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 363
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 364
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 365
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 366
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 367
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 368
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 369
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 370
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 371
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 372
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 373
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 374
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 375
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 376
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 377
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 378
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 379
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 380
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 381
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 382
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 383
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 384
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 385
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 386
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 387
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 388
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 389
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 390
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 391
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 392
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 393
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 394
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 395
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 396
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 397
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 398
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 399
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 400
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 401
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 402
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 403
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 404
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 405
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 406
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 407
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 408
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 409
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 410
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 411
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 412
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 413
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 414
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 415
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 416
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 417
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 418
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 419
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 420
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 421
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 422
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 423
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 424
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 425
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 426
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 427
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 428
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 429
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 430
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 431
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 432
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 433
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 434
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 435
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 436
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 437
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 438
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 439
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 440
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 441
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 442
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 443
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 444
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 445
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 446
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 447
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 448
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 449
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 450
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 451
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 452
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 453
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 454
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 455
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 456
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 457
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 458
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 459
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 460
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 461
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 462
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 463
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 464
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 465
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 466
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 467
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 468
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 469
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 470
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 471
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 472
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 473
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 474
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 475
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 476
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 477
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 478
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 479
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 480
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 481
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 482
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 483
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 484
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 485
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 486
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 487
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 488
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 489
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 490
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 491
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 492
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 493
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 494
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 495
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 496
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 497
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 498
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 499
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 500
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 501
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 502
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 503
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 504
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 505
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 506
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 507
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 508
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 509
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 510
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 511
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 512
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 513
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 514
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 515
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 516
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 517
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 518
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 519
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 520
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 521
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 522
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 523
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 524
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 525
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 526
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 527
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 528
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 529
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 530
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 531
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 532
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 533
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 534
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 535
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 536
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 537
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 538
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 539
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 540
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 541
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 542
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 543
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 544
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 545
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 546
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 547
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 548
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 549
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 550
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 551
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 552
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 553
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 554
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 555
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 556
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 557
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 558
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 559
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 560
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 561
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 562
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 563
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 564
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 565
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 566
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 567
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 568
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 569
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 570
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 571
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 572
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 573
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 574
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 575
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 576
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 577
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 578
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 579
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 580
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 581
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 582
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 583
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 584
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 585
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 586
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 587
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 588
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 589
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 590
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 591
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 592
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 593
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 594
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 595
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 596
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 597
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 598
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 599
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 600
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 601
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 602
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 603
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 604
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 605
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 606
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 607
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 608
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 609
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 610
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 611
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 612
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 613
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 614
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 615
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 616
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 617
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 618
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 619
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 620
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 621
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 622
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 623
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 624
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 625
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 626
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 627
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 628
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 629
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 630
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 631
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 632
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 633
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 634
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 635
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 636
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 637
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 638
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 639
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 640
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 641
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 642
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 643
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 644
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 645
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 646
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 647
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 648
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 649
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 650
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 651
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 652
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 653
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 654
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 655
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 656
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 657
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 658
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 659
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 660
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 661
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 662
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 663
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 664
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 665
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 666
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 667
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 668
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 669
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 670
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 671
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 672
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 673
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 674
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 675
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 676
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 677
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 678
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 679
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 680
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 681
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 682
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 683
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 684
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 685
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 686
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 687
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 688
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 689
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 690
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 691
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 692
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 693
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 694
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 695
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 696
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 697
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 698
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 699
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 700
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 701
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 702
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 703
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 704
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 705
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 706
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 707
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 708
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 709
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 710
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 711
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 712
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 713
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 714
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 715
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 716
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 717
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 718
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 719
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 720
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 721
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 722
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 723
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 724
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 725
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 726
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 727
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 728
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 729
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 730
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 731
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 732
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 733
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 734
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 735
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 736
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 737
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 738
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 739
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 740
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 741
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 742
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 743
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 744
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 745
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 746
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 747
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 748
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 749
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 750
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 751
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 752
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 753
Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower Your VAIO MicroTower comes with the software titles preinstalled on your hard disk drive. Just follow these simple steps to connect the cables and turn on the computer, and your VAIO MicroTower is ready to use.
Choosing a Location for Your Computer
Before you get started, find the best location for your new computer. Here are some things to consider when planning your workspace:
Stable work surface--Use a stable work surface large enough to support the computer, the display, and other equipment.
Ventilation--Leave at least eight inches of space on the left and back sides of your computer to enable proper ventilation.
Placement of the keyboard, mouse, and other input devices--Place your keyboard, mouse, and other input devices so that your arms and hands are in a relaxed, comfortable position. The keyboard should be directly in front of you. Adjust the level of the keyboard so that your lower arms are parallel to the floor. Keep your wrists in a relaxed position when you're using the keyboard--not angled up or down. Use the palmrest only briefly, for resting. While typing, never use the palmrest or rest your hands on the table. Position the mouse at the same level as the keyboard. Hold the mouse with a relaxed hand, and use your whole arm to move it. Take breaks during sessions with your computer. Excessive use of the mouse or a joystick may strain muscles or tendons.
Furniture and posture--Sit in a chair with good back support and armrests. Adjust the level of the chair so your feet are flat on the floor. A footrest may make you more comfortable. Sit in a relaxed, upright posture--avoid slouching forward or leaning far backward.
Viewing angle of the display--Position the display 18 to 26 inches directly in front of you, with the top of the screen at or a little below eye level. Use the display's tilting feature to find the best position. You can reduce eye strain and muscle fatigue by placing the display in the proper position.
Lighting--Choose a location where windows and lights do not create glare and reflection on thePage 754
display. Use indirect lighting to avoid bright spots on the display. You can also purchase accessories for your display that help reduce glare. Proper lighting adds to your comfort and work effectiveness.
Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display
The Sony Multimedia Computer Display (sold separately) is an integrated audio/video unit with built-in speakers and a microphone. Follow these steps to connect it to your computer.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the blue display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the green speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red symbol to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the red microphone cable into this connector.
See the manual that came with your Sony Multimedia Computer Display for more information on setting up and using the display.
Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone
If you did not purchase the Sony Multimedia Computer Display, you need speakers and a microphone to use the computer's audio features.
If you're connecting the computer to a TV or other video component, see Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out).
Make sure your speakers are designed for computer use. See the manuals that came with your display, speakers, and microphone for more information on setting them up and using them.
Page 755
1. Use the blue symbol to locate the monitor (display) connector. Plug the display cable into this connector, and then tighten the two screws to secure the cable.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector. Plug the speaker cable into this connector.
3. Use the red to locate the mic (microphone) connector. Plug the microphone cable into this connector.
Connecting the Optional Palmrest
The keyboard that comes with your computer is equipped with an optional palmrest that you can attach to your keyboard. Follow these steps to connect the palmrest.
1. Place the keyboard and palmrest upside down on a flat surface.
2. Insert the latching posts on the palmrest into the openings on the keyboard.
3. Move the palmrest to the right until you feel it snap into place.
Page 756
Do not keep your wrists on the palmrest while typing; use the palmrest briefly only when resting.
To remove the palmrest
1. Turn the keyboard and palmrest upside down.
2. Push down on the palmrest, and then move it to the left.
3. Lift the palmrest away from the keyboard.
Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse
Follow these steps to connect the keyboard and mouse.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the purple keyboard cable into this connector.
2. Use the blue-green symbol to locate the mouse connector and insert the blue-green mouse cable into this connector.
Page 757
See Computer Basics for more information on setting up and using the keyboard and mouse.
Connecting the Phone Line and Phone
You need to connect a phone line to take advantage of online services, the Internet, and faxing. To use Sony Online Support (SOS), you must also connect a phone.
In order to register your Sony VAIO MicroTower, register your software online, and use Sony Online Support, you must connect your computer to a phone line. Also, you must register your computer to receive the extended warranty.
There are two phone jacks on the back panel. Follow these steps to connect your phone line and phone.
The location of the Line and Telephone jacks on your computer may vary from those shown in the illustration .
1. Unplug your phone from the wall jack and plug it into the telephone jack on the computer.
2. Plug one end of the phone cable that came with your system into the line jack and the other end into the wall jack.
Page 758
Your computer does not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
Connecting the Power Cords
Follow these steps to connect the power cords.
1. Plug the power cord into the connector on the computer.
2. If necessary, plug the display power cord into the display.
3. Plug both the display and power cords into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterruptible Power Supply.
Page 759
Connecting Peripherals
You can add functionality to your computer by connecting any of the following peripherals.
Connecting Enables You To For Details Television Send audio and video from the computer to the TV. Allows you to play games and watch movies on a large screen. Also useful for business presentations. See Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out) Printer Print documents from the computer. See Connecting a Printer Joystick Connect a joystick, which enhances game playing. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument MIDI device Connect MIDI instruments. See Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device* Connect a digital video camera without shutting down your computer. Enhance still pictures or edit your videos with easy-to-use, preloaded software applications. See Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
S/PDIF equipped device*
Record digital audio directly from your computer to audio recording devices such as a digital receiver or minidisc Player/Recorder. See Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device S-Link (Control A1) equipped device* Connect a minidisc player or CD changer and create libraries of your favorite music on your computer. See Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device Universal Serial Bus (USB) device Connect USB devices. See Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device Serial device Connect serial devices, such as a digital camera. See Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
* Some models of the VAIO MicroTower may not include this feature.
Turn off the computer before connecting peripherals. In normal use, you should turn on the peripherals before turning on the computer. You can connect USB devices while the computer is on.
Page 760
Connecting a Television (Audio/Video Out)
Connecting a television to your computer enables you to send audio and video from the computer to the television. (You will be able to watch video and hear audio on both the computer and the television.)
You can also connect the computer to a camcorder, VCR, or other video component that has a VIDEO IN or S VIDEO IN connector.
If your system includes the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO IN connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the headphones connector on the computer. Plug the black
end of the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the
audio splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors. (This enables you to hear audio on the multimedia monitor as well as on your TV.)
3. Plug the green audio plug from the display cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Then use the red symbol to locate the mic connector on the computer. Plug the red microphone cable from the display cable into this connector.
If your system does not include the Sony Multimedia Computer Display:
Page 761
1. Use the yellow symbol to locate the composite video out connector on the computer. Plug either end of the yellow video cable into this connector. Then plug the other end of the cable into the TV's video in connector.
If your TV has an S VIDEO in connector, use the S VIDEO cable to connect the computer's S VIDEO OUT jack to the TV's S VIDEO IN jack. S VIDEO provides a better picture than a conventional video connection.
2. Use the green symbol to locate the phones connector on the computer. Plug the black end of
the audio splitter cable into this connector. Then plug the red and white ends of the audio
splitter cable into the TV's audio in connectors.
3. Plug the speaker cable into the connector on the audio splitter cable .
Connecting a Printer
You can connect a printer to your computer to print documents from your computer.
1. Use the dark grey symbol to locate the printer connector. Plug the printer cable into this connector.
2. If necessary, plug one end of the printer power cord into the printer, and the other end into a grounded AC wall outlet, power strip, or Uninterrupted Power Supply. Page 762
See the manual that came with your printer for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Joystick or MIDI Instrument
You can connect a joystick or MIDI instrument to your computer. You can also purchase an adapter to connect additional devices.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the game connector. Plug the joystick or MIDI cable into this connector.
Page 763
Your MIDI instrument may have a different type of cable which requires an adapter. See the manual that came with your joystick or MIDI instrument for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include i.LINK (IEEE-1394) connectors. See Read Me First for information on your specific model. i.LINK connectors may be located on the front, back, or both the front and back of your system.
To connect an i.LINK (IEEE-1394) device
Use the symbol to locate the i.link connector. Plug the i.LINK device into this connector.
Page 764
See the manual that came with your i.LINK (IEEE-1394) equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting an S/PDIF Equipped Digital Audio Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S/PDIF (Sony/Phillips Digital Interface) Optical Digital Audio Output connector. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S/PDIF device
Locate the S/PDIF (Optical Digital Audio Output) connector. Plug the S/PDIF device into this connector.
Page 765
See the manual that came with your digital audio device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Your VAIO computer incorporates Serial Copy Management System, which will not prevent you from making a direct digital-to-digital copy from a digital source, but from such copies will prevent a second digital-to-digital copy from being made.
Connecting an S-Link (Control A1) Equipped Device
Some models of the VAIO MicroTower include an S-Link (Control A1) connector. Control A1 connections provide a path for the transmission of control signals, thus enabling automatic operation and control features that are usually associated with integrated audio systems. See Read Me First for information on your specific model.
To connect an S-Link (Control A1) device
Locate the S-Link (Control A1) connector. Plug the S-Link (Control A1) device into this connector.
Page 766
See the manual that came with your S-Link equipped device for more information on setting it up and using it.
Connecting a Universal Serial Bus Device
You can connect Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices to your computer. There is one USB connection on the front of your computer and another one on the back.
Use the dark grey symbol to locate the usb connector. Plug the USB cable into this connector.
Page 767
See the manuals that came with your USB devices for more information on setting up and using them.
Connecting a Digital Still Camera or Other Serial Peripheral
You can connect other computer peripherals, such as Sony's digital still camera, to the computer's serial port.
Plug the serial cable from the digital camera into the serial port.
Page 768
See the manual that came with your digital camera for more information on setting it up and using it.
Starting Your Computer
After you connect all the cables and accessories to your computer, you are ready to turn on the computer.
1. Press the power switch on the display to turn on the power.
2. Press the power switch on the front panel of the computer to turn on the power.
Page 769
See Using the Standby Mode and Shutting Down Your Computer for instructions on turning off your computer.
After shutting down your computer, wait 10 seconds before turning the computer on again.
Registering Windows 98
The first time you turn on your computer, you need to complete a few steps to register and configure the Windows software that is already installed on your computer. You do not need to repeat these steps each time you turn on your computer.
You must register Windows before you can use your computer.
The on-screen instructions guide you through the registration and configuration process. The following is an overview of the process.
1. Gathering information:
o Enter your name.
o Read and accept the License Agreement.
o Enter your Certificate of Authenticity number located on the cover of the Windows Getting Started manual.
2. Windows setup:
o Click the Finish button on the Windows Setup Wizard screen.
3. Selecting your computer settings:
o If necessary, change the Time Zone, Date and Time on the Date/Time Properties screen.
4. Learning about Windows:
o If you want, take the tour of Windows.
Registering Your Computer Page 770
Take advantage of Sony's commitment to quality customer support and receive these benefits by registering your computer:
Sony Online Support--Talk to a Support Representative to troubleshoot problems you may be having with your computer.
Limited warranty--Protect your investment. See Limited Warranty Statement for details.
You must register your VAIO MicroTower to extend the warranty for an additional nine months beyond the initial 90-day warranty period.
On-site service--Provides convenient resolution of problems.
Follow these steps to use the computer online registration service.
1. Click the Sony VAIO Registration icon on the VAIO desktop.
2. Enter the information requested on the first online registration form. Press the tab key to move from box to box.
3. Click the Next button to advance to the next form.
4. Complete the remaining forms by clicking the Next button each time you complete a form.
The computer automatically transfers your registration information using your built-in modem and a toll-free telephone number.
Using the Standby Mode
When you are done using your computer, you can put it in standby mode rather than turn it off completely. Putting the computer in standby mode allows you to return quickly to normal computer use.
To put the computer in standby mode
1. Save your work and close any applications that are running. (You can leave Microsoft Windows running.)
2. Press the (Standby) button on the top of the keyboard.
The computer goes into standby mode. See Read Me First for additional information on using the standby mode.
To change the length of time before the computer goes into standby mode
The computer automatically goes into standby mode when there is no activity on the computer for a specified amount of time. You can select this length of time from the Windows Control Panel.
To take the computer out of standby mode
Press any key on the keyboard, move the mouse, or press the power switch on the front panel again.
Standby Mode Indicators
You can tell which mode the computer is in by the color of the power indicator light.
Color Mode Amber Computer is in standby mode. Green Computer is out of standby mode, ready to use. No color Computer is turned off.
In standby mode you may periodically hear the computer's fan turn on and off, depending on the room's temperature. This is normal functioning in standby mode.
Page 771
Shutting Down Your Computer
When you're ready to turn off your computer for an extended period of time, use the following procedure to shut down the computer.
To avoid the potential loss of data, do not press the power switch before you shut down the computer.
To shut down your computer
If you plan to shut down your computer for a short period of time, you may want to use standby mode instead. See Using the Standby Mode.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Click Shut Down to display the Shut Down Windows dialog box.
3. Select Shut down to shut down the computer.
4. Click OK to complete the shutdown process.
Respond to any prompts about saving documents.
5. Wait for your computer to turn off automatically -- the power indicator light turns off.
6. Turn off the display and any other peripherals connected to your computer.
Page 772
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 773
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 774
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 775
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 776
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 777
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 778
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 779
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 780
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 781
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 782
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 783
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 784
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 785
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 786
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 787
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 788
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 789
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 790
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 791
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 792
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 793
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 794
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 795
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 796
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 797
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 798
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 799
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 800
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 801
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 802
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 803
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 804
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 805
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 806
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 807
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 808
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 809
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 810
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 811
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 812
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 813
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 814
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 815
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 816
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 817
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 818
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 819
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 820
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 821
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 822
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 823
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 824
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 825
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 826
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 827
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 828
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 829
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 830
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 831
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 832
Getting Started With VAIO Space VAIO Space is Sony's original utility that organizes the preinstalled applications on your VAIO MicroTower, making it easier for you to find and launch the applications on your computer, use the Sony audio and video players, connect to the Internet, and more.
Starting VAIO Space
To start VAIO Space
Click the VAIO Space icon on the Windows desktop.
The VAIO Launcher appears, which includes icons for the five VAIO Space centers:
VAIO Space Centers
There are five centers within VAIO Space, as follows:
Center Name Icon Contains Description
Software Center Applications Accessories Contains icons for preinstalled applications and accessories.
See Using the Software Center for details.
Audio-Video Center Video Audio Still Imaging
Page 833
DV Editing Adv. Audio DVD Launches the video and audio applications included with your computer.
See Using the Audio-Video Center for details.
Online Center Easy Internet VAIO Direct Club VAIO ImageStation Internet VAIO Links Allows you to connect to the Internet, go to selected Sony web sites, and manage bookmarks.
See Using the Online Center for details. Tool
Center VAIO Find Desktop Tools Options Provides tools that help you find specific application files, change your desktop configuration, analyze and fix system-related problems, and customize VAIO Space.
See Using the Tool Center for details.
Help Center Help Center Contains links to various sources of help for your VAIO MicroTower computer.
See Using the Help Center for details.
Navigating through VAIO Space
To go to a center within VAIO Space
1. Move the mouse pointer over an icon on the VAIO Launcher. Categories for each center appear.
2. Click the category text (such as Applications) to open the VAIO screen.
Page 834
Your application screen may appear different from the one shown here.
VAIO Space Controls Button Function
Goes to the previous screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable until you go to another screen.
Goes to the next screen or page in a sequence. Unavailable on the last screen in a sequence.
Stops loading the current page (used for web pages).
Refreshes the current page (used for web pages).
Adds the currently displayed page to the list of bookmarks under the Online Center's VAIO Links (see Using the Online Center). VAIO Links are also accessible through the Internet Explorer Favorites list.
Displays the current website address (URL) or file name path. You can also type an address or path in this box.
Minimizes, maximizes/restores, and closes VAIO Space. Scrolls up to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher. Scrolls down to show the contents of the VAIO Launcher.
Closes the VAIO Launcher. Click again to open the VAIO Launcher.
Animates when a web page is loading.
Page 835
Using the Software Center
To launch the Software Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Software Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category (Applications or Accessories) to open the VAIO screen.
3. To start an application, click the icon.
Other Software Center Functions
Action Procedure Display information about a program. Move the mouse pointer over the program icon.
Display questions and answers about the highlighted program. Click (grayed out when unavailable)
Create and save notes about the highlighted program. Click
Display a help or readme file about the highlighted program. Click
(grayed out when unavailable)
Displays the application's upgrade web page. Click
(grayed out when unavailable) Add an application icon to the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from anywhere within Windows onto the VAIO screen. Remove an application icon from the Software Center. Drag and drop an application icon from the Software Center to the Windows Recycle Bin.
Using the Audio-Video Center
The Audio-Video Center includes the following programs:
Program Description VideoPlays MPEG (.mpg), MPEG2 (.vob, .mpg) and AVI (.avi) video files.
Audio Includes the following players:
Mixer, which controls the volume and balance for sound files, videos, audio tracks, etc.
Media player, which plays WAV (.wav), MIDI (.mid), and the audio portion of MPEG (.mpg) files.
DVD player, which plays DVD and CD audio tracks from your DVD-ROM drive.
Still Imaging DVgate Still and Picture Gear
DVgate Still allows you to capture frames from video and save them as still images.
Picture Gear allows you to organize, create a slide show, and make a screen saver from your still images.
DV Editing DVgate Motion Create your own movie by bringing video into your VAIO computer from your digital video camera; divide your captured video into precise video clips; and reassemble video clips into a full-motion action movie. Page 836
Advanced Audio Digital Media Pack
Media Bar plays video files and audio files from multi-disc CD players.
Library allows you to create and organize multiple-named playlists.
Showcase library components allow you to organize all kinds of digital media.
Minidisc Editor combines music and sounds from multiple sources into a minidisc.
DVD Plays DVDs (Digital Versatile Discs).
For details on using the application, see the application's on-line help.
Using the Online Center
To launch the Online Center
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Online Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description Easy Internet Provides an intuitive interface to do almost everything on the Internet: browsing, e-mail, navigating to the best sites on the web, and interacting with multimedia content. Includes 50 free hours of Internet access from GTE Internetworking. (No credit card needed.) VAIO Direct Save money by ordering products direct from Sony Online. Club VAIO Find out the latest developments in the world of VAIO; interact with other VAIO users. ImageStation The easy way to share your photos with friends and family online. Internet Shortcuts to all your Internet applications. VAIO Links A convenient tool for organizing all your bookmarks to local or Internet pages.
Using the Tool Center
Using Tool Center Tools
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Tool Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click the text of the category as described below.
Category Description VAIO Find One-button searches for picture files, movies, sound files, text documents, or Microsoft Works files. Desktop Displays the Windows Display Properties box, which lets you change the wallpaper, screen saver, and display resolution. ToolsDisplays applications that provide tools to help you analyze and fix system-related problems. (This screen also functions similarly to the Software Center screen. For details, see Other Software Center Functions.) Options Lets you customize the way VAIO Space works.
Using the Help Center
To launch the Help Center: Page 837
1. Move the mouse pointer over the Help Center icon on the VAIO Launcher.
2. Click Help Center to open the VAIO screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to find the appropriate source of help for the problem you are having.
Exiting VAIO Space
To exit VAIO Space
Click the (Close) button.
Page 838
Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:
VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.
Calling SOS
The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:
Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.
Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.
Specify the access level for the CSR.
The CSR resolves the problem.
Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.
To place a call to SOS
1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.
2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.
Page 839
3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.
4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.
5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.
6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.
7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.
8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.
9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:
Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.
You can change the access level during your call to SOS.
If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.
When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.
Page 840
10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.
11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.
Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
My computer won't start
Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.
Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.
Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.
If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.
Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.
Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).
My computer "locks up"
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.
If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.
Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.
My software program "locks up" or crashes
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.
My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open
Make sure the computer is turned on.
Press the Eject button on the drive.
Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.
If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.
I cannot play a CD-ROM disc
Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 841
Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.
I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.
If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.
If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.
A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.
When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start
Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.
Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.
My speakers have no sound
Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.
If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.
If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.
If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.
If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.
Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.
If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.
My modem connection is slow
The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:
Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.
If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.
If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 842
If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.
My modem doesn't work
Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.
Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.
Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.
Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.
My microphone doesn't work
Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
My microphone is too sensitive to background noise
If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:
1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.
2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.
3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.
4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.
5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.
6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.
7. Close the Recording Control window.
My mouse doesn't work
Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:
o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.
o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.
o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.
o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.
o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.
My keyboard doesn't work
Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
I can't find the Windows taskbar
Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 843
Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.
See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.
Using the System Recovery CD(s)
You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.
Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).
The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.
The System Recovery utility gives you three options:
Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.
Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.
Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.
If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the System Recovery CD(s)
You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.
1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.
The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.
2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.
3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.
4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.
5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.
The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 844
Using the Application Recovery CD(s)
The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).
You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the Application Recovery CD(s)
1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.
2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.
3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.
Page 845
Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:
VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.
Calling SOS
The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:
Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.
Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.
Specify the access level for the CSR.
The CSR resolves the problem.
Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.
To place a call to SOS
1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.
2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.
Page 846
3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.
4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.
5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.
6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.
7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.
8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.
9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:
Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.
You can change the access level during your call to SOS.
If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.
When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.
Page 847
10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.
11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.
Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
My computer won't start
Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.
Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.
Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.
If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.
Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.
Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).
My computer "locks up"
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.
If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.
Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.
My software program "locks up" or crashes
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.
My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open
Make sure the computer is turned on.
Press the Eject button on the drive.
Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.
If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.
I cannot play a CD-ROM disc
Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 848
Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.
I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.
If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.
If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.
A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.
When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start
Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.
Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.
My speakers have no sound
Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.
If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.
If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.
If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.
If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.
Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.
If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.
My modem connection is slow
The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:
Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.
If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.
If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 849
If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.
My modem doesn't work
Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.
Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.
Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.
Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.
My microphone doesn't work
Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
My microphone is too sensitive to background noise
If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:
1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.
2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.
3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.
4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.
5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.
6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.
7. Close the Recording Control window.
My mouse doesn't work
Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:
o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.
o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.
o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.
o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.
o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.
My keyboard doesn't work
Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
I can't find the Windows taskbar
Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 850
Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.
See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.
Using the System Recovery CD(s)
You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.
Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).
The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.
The System Recovery utility gives you three options:
Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.
Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.
Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.
If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the System Recovery CD(s)
You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.
1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.
The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.
2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.
3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.
4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.
5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.
The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 851
Using the Application Recovery CD(s)
The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).
You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the Application Recovery CD(s)
1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.
2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.
3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.
Page 852
Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:
VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.
Calling SOS
The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:
Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.
Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.
Specify the access level for the CSR.
The CSR resolves the problem.
Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.
To place a call to SOS
1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.
2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.
Page 853
3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.
4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.
5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.
6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.
7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.
8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.
9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:
Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.
You can change the access level during your call to SOS.
If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.
When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.
Page 854
10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.
11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.
Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
My computer won't start
Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.
Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.
Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.
If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.
Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.
Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).
My computer "locks up"
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.
If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.
Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.
My software program "locks up" or crashes
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.
My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open
Make sure the computer is turned on.
Press the Eject button on the drive.
Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.
If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.
I cannot play a CD-ROM disc
Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 855
Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.
I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.
If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.
If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.
A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.
When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start
Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.
Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.
My speakers have no sound
Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.
If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.
If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.
If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.
If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.
Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.
If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.
My modem connection is slow
The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:
Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.
If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.
If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 856
If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.
My modem doesn't work
Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.
Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.
Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.
Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.
My microphone doesn't work
Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
My microphone is too sensitive to background noise
If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:
1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.
2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.
3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.
4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.
5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.
6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.
7. Close the Recording Control window.
My mouse doesn't work
Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:
o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.
o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.
o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.
o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.
o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.
My keyboard doesn't work
Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
I can't find the Windows taskbar
Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 857
Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.
See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.
Using the System Recovery CD(s)
You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.
Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).
The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.
The System Recovery utility gives you three options:
Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.
Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.
Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.
If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the System Recovery CD(s)
You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.
1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.
The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.
2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.
3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.
4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.
5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.
The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 858
Using the Application Recovery CD(s)
The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).
You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the Application Recovery CD(s)
1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.
2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.
3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.
Page 859
Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:
VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.
Calling SOS
The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:
Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.
Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.
Specify the access level for the CSR.
The CSR resolves the problem.
Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.
To place a call to SOS
1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.
2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.
Page 860
3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.
4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.
5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.
6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.
7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.
8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.
9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:
Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.
You can change the access level during your call to SOS.
If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.
When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.
Page 861
10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.
11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.
Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
My computer won't start
Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.
Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.
Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.
If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.
Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.
Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).
My computer "locks up"
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.
If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.
Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.
My software program "locks up" or crashes
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.
My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open
Make sure the computer is turned on.
Press the Eject button on the drive.
Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.
If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.
I cannot play a CD-ROM disc
Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 862
Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.
I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.
If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.
If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.
A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.
When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start
Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.
Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.
My speakers have no sound
Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.
If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.
If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.
If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.
If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.
Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.
If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.
My modem connection is slow
The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:
Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.
If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.
If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 863
If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.
My modem doesn't work
Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.
Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.
Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.
Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.
My microphone doesn't work
Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
My microphone is too sensitive to background noise
If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:
1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.
2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.
3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.
4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.
5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.
6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.
7. Close the Recording Control window.
My mouse doesn't work
Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:
o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.
o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.
o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.
o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.
o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.
My keyboard doesn't work
Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
I can't find the Windows taskbar
Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 864
Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.
See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.
Using the System Recovery CD(s)
You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.
Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).
The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.
The System Recovery utility gives you three options:
Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.
Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.
Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.
If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the System Recovery CD(s)
You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.
1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.
The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.
2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.
3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.
4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.
5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.
The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 865
Using the Application Recovery CD(s)
The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).
You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the Application Recovery CD(s)
1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.
2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.
3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.
Page 866
Getting Help Sony provides several support options for your Sony computer. When you have questions about your computer and the preinstalled software, check these sources for answers, in the following sequence:
VAIO MicroTower Read Me First Contains a complete list of the items that ship with your computer, product specifications, software support information, and the most up-to-date information on using your computer. VAIO MicroTower User Guide Explains how to set up and upgrade your computer. Online User Guide This electronic document contains additional information on the preinstalled software titles. You can access this guide from the Help Center on the Windows Start menu. VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual Provides detailed technical information about the hardware in your VAIO MicroTower. This electronic document is available from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Manuals and online help files that may accompany your preinstalled software Most of the manuals for preinstalled software are located on your hard disk drive as online help files. You can access the online help files from the Help menu in the specific application. A printed manual is available for some applications. Knowledge Database Provides instant access to information on commonly encountered problems. Enter a description of your problem and the Knowledge Database searches for the corresponding solutions online. You can access the Sony Knowledge Database at: http://www.sony.com/pcsupport Sony Fax-on-Demand This service provides you with answers to commonly asked questions. You can use this automated service to request a list of available topics and then select the topics that you want to receive. To contact the Sony fax-on-demand service, call 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). (Requires a fax machine or your fax software. Fax software is included on your system as part of Microsoft Outlook.) Sony SOS software This preinstalled program connects you to a Customer Support Representative. SOS is available seven days a week for 90 days after the original date of purchase. Connect a phone line and phone before you call, so the representative can access your system if necessary. Calling SOS describes how to use the SOS software. Calling SOS You can call and speak with a Sony Customer Support Representative without using your computer by calling 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). Software support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week for 90 days at no charge after the original date of purchase.
Calling SOS
The SOS application enables you to exchange information with a Sony Customer Support Representative (CSR). Here's how it works:
Type your name, phone number, and the problem details in the SOS window.
Dial the SOS hotline with a single click of the mouse.
Specify the access level for the CSR.
The CSR resolves the problem.
Before using SOS, make sure the computer is connected to a phone line and telephone as described in Connecting the Phone Line and Phone. If you do not have a phone line connected to your computer, you can place a voice call to SOS by dialing 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972). SOS support is available at no charge for 90 days from the original date of purchase.
To place a call to SOS
1. Click the Start button on the Windows 98 taskbar.
2. Point to Programs, point to VoiceView, and then click VoiceView. The SOS window appears.
Page 867
3. In the SOS window, type your name, phone number, and a description of the problem. This information cannot be seen by the customer support representative until you give the CSR access to your computer.
4. Click the Call SOS button. The confirmation screen appears.
5. Click the OK button. The Dialer screen appears.
6. Pick up the handset and click the Dial button as instructed. Your modem dials the toll-free number and connects you to the Sony support center.
7. You are asked whether you wish to test your system or talk to a support representative. You are then prompted to indicate the type of computer you are using.
8. Discuss the problem with the CSR and follow the CSR's instructions to resolve the problem. Only if the CSR needs to access your computer are you prompted to select a security option, as described in the next step.
9. Select an access level in the Remote Command Security dialog box by clicking one of these options:
Options Descriptions Full access Allows the CSR to fully interact with your computer. The CSR can access all the files on your hard disk drive and can copy files to and from your computer to solve your problem. Limited access Lets the CSR view your system, but you must approve every action the CSR takes. If the CSR wants to copy a file, for example, the Remote Command Permission dialog box prompts you to approve this action. No access Prevents the CSR from accessing your system. You must perform all the operations as described to you by the CSR.
You can change the access level during your call to SOS.
If you experience difficulty hearing the CSR, adjust the speaker volume.
When a file is transferred between your computer and SOS, a status box displays the progress of the file transfer.
Page 868
10. To end a call, click the Hang Up button.
11. Click the Close box at the top right corner of the SOS window or select Exit from the File menu to close the SOS window.
Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve common problems you may encounter when using your computer. Many problems have simple solutions, so try these suggestions before you call Sony Online Support. For more advanced troubleshooting information, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
My computer won't start
Check that the computer is plugged into a power source and that it is turned on. Check that the power light is lit on the front panel of the computer.
Make sure a diskette is not in the diskette drive.
Confirm that the power cord and all cables are connected firmly, as described in the Setting Up Your VAIO MicroTower chapter.
If you plugged the computer into a power strip or UPS, make sure the power strip or UPS is turned on and working.
Check that the display is plugged into a power source and turned on. Check that the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted correctly. See the manual that came with your display for details.
Check that the computer is not in standby mode (see Using the Standby Mode).
My computer "locks up"
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Try restarting the computer. On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, click Shut Down, click Restart, and then click OK.
If you cannot restart as described in the preceding step, you can restart the computer by pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE or press the power switch for more than six seconds.
Pressing CTRL+ALT+DELETE may result in losing changes made to files that are currently open.
My software program "locks up" or crashes
Close the application that is currently locked up by pressing ALT+F4.
Contact the software publisher or designated provider for technical support. See the online User Guide for a complete list of phone numbers.
My DVD-ROM drive tray won't open
Make sure the computer is turned on.
Press the Eject button on the drive.
Double-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop. Right-click the CD-ROM icon. Select the Eject option from the pop-up menu.
If the Eject button does not work, you can open the tray by inserting a straightened heavy-weight paper clip into the emergency eject hole.
I cannot play a CD-ROM disc
Make sure you place the disc in the tray with the label side facing up. Page 869
Make sure the software is installed according to the program's instructions.
I cannot play a DVD-ROM disc
If a region code warning appears when you are using the DVD player, it could be that the DVD-ROM disc you are trying to play is incompatible with the DVD-ROM drive in your VAIO MicroTower. The region code is listed on the disc's packaging. Region code indicators such as "1" or "ALL" are labeled on some DVDs to indicate what type of player can play the disc. If a number or "ALL" does not appear on the DVD, you cannot play the disc on this computer.
If you hear audio but cannot see video, your computer's video resolution may be set too high. For best results, change the Windows Control Panel/Display/Settings to 800 x 600 using 16-bit color.
If you see video but cannot hear audio, check all of the following: Make sure the mute setting is off in your DVD player. Check the master volume setting in the audio Mixer. Check the volume settings in your computer speakers. Check the connections between your speakers and the computer. Check the Windows Control Panel/System/Device Manager to see that the drivers are installed properly.
A dirty or damaged disc may cause the computer to "hang" while it tries to read the disc. If necessary, reboot the computer, remove the disc, and then check that it is not dirty or damaged. For cleaning instructions, see On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs.
When I double-click an application icon, a message such as "You must insert the application CD into your CD-ROM drive" appears and the software does not start
Some titles require specific files that are located on the application's CD-ROM disc. Insert the disc and try starting the program again.
Check to make sure you inserted the CD-ROM disc with the label side facing up.
My speakers have no sound
Check that the speakers are plugged into the headphones connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
If the speakers have a mute button, make sure it is off.
If the speakers are powered by batteries, check that the batteries are inserted properly and that they are charged.
If the speakers use an external power source, make sure that the power cord is plugged into a grounded wall outlet or power strip.
If the speakers have their own volume control, check the volume level.
If the program you are using has its own volume control, check that the volume is turned up.
Check the volume controls in the application, in the audio Mixer, and in Windows.
If you connected headphones to the computer, you will not hear sound from the speakers.
My modem connection is slow
The computer's modem uses K56flex technology/V.90. Many factors influence modem connection speed, including telephone line noise or compatibility with telephone equipment (such as fax machines or other modems). If you think your modem is not connecting properly to other PC-based modems, fax machines or your Internet Service Provider, check the following:
Have your phone company check that your phone line is free from any line noise.
If your problem is fax-related, check that there are no problems with the fax machine you are calling and that it is compatible with fax modems.
If you are having a problem connecting with your Internet Service Provider, check that the ISP is not experiencing technical problems. Page 870
If you have a second phone line available, try connecting the modem to this line.
My modem doesn't work
Check that the phone line is plugged into the line jack. See Connecting the Phone Line and Phone for details.
Check that the phone line is working. You can check the line by plugging in an ordinary phone and listening for a dial tone.
Check that the phone number the program is dialing is correct.
Check that the software you are using is compatible with the Sony computer modem. (All preinstalled programs are compatible.) Call the software publisher or Sony Online Support.
My microphone doesn't work
Check that the microphone is plugged into the mic connector. See Connecting the Sony Multimedia Computer Display or Connecting a Display, Speakers, and a Microphone for details.
My microphone is too sensitive to background noise
If you find there is too much background noise when you record sound, you should adjust the microphone gain by following these steps:
1. Right-click the speaker icon (Volume) in the lower right Windows task tray.
2. Click Open Volume Controls. The Volume Control screen appears.
3. In the Options menu, select Properties. The Properties screen appears.
4. Change the setting for "Adjust volume for" from Playback to Recording, then click OK.
5. Click the Advanced button under Microphone Balance. The Advanced Controls for Microphone screen appears.
6. Deselect the checkbox for 1 Mic Gain (+20dB), then click the Close button.
7. Close the Recording Control window.
My mouse doesn't work
Check that the mouse is plugged into the mouse connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
There may be dust or dirt inside the mouse mechanism. To clean the mouse, follow these steps:
o Turn off your computer. See Shutting Down Your Computer for details.
o Remove the mouse ball cover on the back side of the mouse.
o Turn the mouse upright, and drop the mouse ball into your hand.
o Using a piece of tape, remove any dust or dirt on the mouse ball and inside the mouse ball socket.
o Return the mouse ball to the socket, and replace the mouse ball cover.
My keyboard doesn't work
Check that the keyboard is plugged into the usb connector. See Connecting the Keyboard and Mouse for details.
I can't find the Windows taskbar
Check that the taskbar is not hidden or shrunken. Page 871
Use the mouse to point to the left, right, top, and bottom edges of the screen.
See the VAIO MicroTower Read Me First for additional information on using your Sony computer.
Using the System Recovery CD(s)
You can reinstall software titles that shipped with your computer if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. You may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you experience a problem with your computer, reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct the problem.
Use the Application Recovery CD(s) to reinstall individual applications or device drivers. See Using the Application Recovery CD(s).
The System Recovery CD(s) contains a backup copy of the all the software originally installed on your hard disk drive. It can be used only to recover the hard disk of the Sony computer you purchased.
The System Recovery utility gives you three options:
Full Restore without Format restores all the software titles that originally came with your computer without formatting the hard disk.
Full Restore with Format formats the hard disk drive and then restores all the original software.
Operating System Only formats the hard disk drive and restores the Windows operating system and the device drivers that shipped with your computer. This option is recommended for advanced users only.
If you choose the Full Restore with Format or Operating System Only option, your hard disk will be formatted, which removes all the information on the hard disk drive. You will lose any software you have installed and any other files you have created since you started to use your computer. This means you will have to reinstall any applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you choose to the Full Restore without Format option, you may need to reinstall applications that were not included with the computer when you purchased it. If you have any questions on using the System Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the System Recovery CD(s)
You need to complete the Windows registration process when you use the System Recovery CD(s). Make sure you have the product ID number located on the cover of your Microsoft Windows manual. You will need this number to complete the recovery process.
1. Insert the Sony System Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive.
The System Recovery utility boots from the DVD-ROM drive. It must be in the DVD-ROM drive when you turn on the computer.
2. Shut down your computer as described on Shutting Down Your Computer.
3. Wait 30 seconds and turn on your computer.
4. Click OK to signify you have read and accept the Microsoft End-User License Agreement.
5. When the System Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two System Recovery CDs. If you have two System Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the System Recovery program. You are prompted to insert the second CD once the information from the first CD has been installed.
The recovery process takes between 30 to 60 minutes to complete. Page 872
Using the Application Recovery CD(s)
The Application Recovery CD(s) allows you to reinstall individual applications and device drivers if they are corrupted or accidentally erased. Reinstalling an individual device driver or software title may correct a problem you are experiencing with your computer, and you may not need to recover the entire contents of your hard drive. If you do need to reinstall all the software titles that shipped with your computer, use the System Recovery CD(s). See Using the System Recovery CD(s).
You must be in Windows to run the Application Recovery CD(s). The application will not run from DOS. If you have any questions on using the Application Recovery CD(s), contact Sony Online Support (SOS).
To use the Application Recovery CD(s)
1. Turn on your computer. If your computer is already on, close all applications.
2. When the Windows desktop appears, insert the Sony Application Recovery CD in the DVD-ROM drive. The Application Recovery utility loads automatically.
3. When the Application Recovery menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions to complete the recovery process.
Your system may include one or two Application Recovery CDs. If you have two Application Recovery CDs, insert the first CD to run the Application Recovery program. You may be prompted to insert the second CD, depending on the application you wish to restore.
Page 873
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 874
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 875
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 876
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 877
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 878
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 879
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 880
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 881
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 882
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 883
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 884
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 885
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 886
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 887
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 888
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 889
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 890
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 891
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 892
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 893
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 894
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 895
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 896
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 897
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 898
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 899
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 900
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 901
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 902
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 903
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 904
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 905
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 906
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 907
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 908
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 909
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 910
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 911
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 912
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 913
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 914
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 915
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 916
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 917
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 918
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 919
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 920
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 921
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 922
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 923
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 924
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 925
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 926
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 927
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 928
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 929
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 930
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 931
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 932
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 933
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 934
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 935
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 936
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 937
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 938
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 939
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 940
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 941
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 942
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 943
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 944
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 945
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 946
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 947
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 948
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 949
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 950
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 951
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 952
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 953
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 954
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 955
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 956
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 957
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 958
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 959
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 960
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 961
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 962
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 963
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 964
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 965
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 966
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 967
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 968
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 969
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 970
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 971
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 972
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 973
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 974
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 975
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 976
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 977
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 978
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 979
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 980
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 981
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 982
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 983
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 984
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 985
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 986
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 987
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 988
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 989
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 990
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 991
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 992
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 993
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 994
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 995
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 996
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 997
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 998
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 999
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 1000
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 1001
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1002
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 1003
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 1004
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1005
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 1006
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 1007
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 1008
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 1009
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 1010
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1011
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1012
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1013
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 1014
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 1015
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 1016
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1017
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 1018
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 1019
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1020
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 1021
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 1022
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 1023
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 1024
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 1025
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1026
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1027
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1028
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 1029
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 1030
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 1031
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1032
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 1033
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 1034
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1035
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 1036
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 1037
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 1038
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 1039
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 1040
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1041
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1042
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1043
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 1044
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 1045
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 1046
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1047
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 1048
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 1049
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1050
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 1051
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 1052
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 1053
Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower In the future you may want to install additional boards to expand the functionality of your computer. This section describes how to open your computer and insert add-in boards, add memory, replace the lithium battery, and install an additional hard disk drive. For more information on upgrading your Sony computer, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual. You can download this electronic document from the Sony website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
The procedures in this section assume you are familiar with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment. Read Notes on Use before upgrading your Sony computer.
Always switch the power off before you open the system or connect your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described here only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining continuous contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
Inserting an Add-in Board
You can add up to two additional PCI boards to the system.
Your VAIO MicroTower cannot accommodate PCI add-in boards exceeding 7.7" in length.
To insert an add-in board
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add boards to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use.
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
4. Identify the expansion slot where you want to insert the add-in board.
5. Remove the slot cover for the slot you have chosen.
Page 1054
6. Install the add-in board by plugging it into the expansion slot on the system board. Attach any internal cables that the board requires (see the manual for the add-in board).
Page 1055
7. Replace the left-side panel as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Adding Memory
In order to increase your computer's memory, you may need to remove one of the factory-installed DIMMs and replace it with one of greater capacity. For details, see the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual, which is available at Sony's website at http://www.sony.com/pcsupport.
For memory upgrades, use only 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 64-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0 or 3.3V unbuffered 4-clock 72-bit 66 MHz SDRAM DIMM module Rev1.0. For more information on MicroTower compatible memory, call Sony at 1-888-4SONYPC (1-888-476-6972).
To install memory
Make sure you observe the proper safety precautions when you add DIMMs to your Sony computer. See Notes on Use .
1. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers.
2. Unplug your computer and any peripheral devices.
3. Remove the left-side panel, bottom panel, and front panel, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel to Removing the Front Panel. Then detach the diskette drive, as described on page Detaching the Diskette Drive. Page 1056
You do not need to completely remove the diskette drive in order to access the DIMM sockets.
4. If necessary, remove any cables, add-in cards or other components to access the DIMM sockets.
5. Remove either (or both) of the factory-installed DIMMs.
6. Handle the DIMM only by the edges, and remove it from its anti-static package.
7. Locate the keys on the bottom edge of the DIMM .
8. Align the DIMM over the socket.
To avoid damaging the DIMM socket, move the DIMM socket tabs slightly outward to relieve pressure. The DIMM should then click easily into place.
9. Firmly insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into the socket.
10. Press evenly against the DIMM's upper corners. The end latches snap into position automatically.
11. Reinstall any add-in cards or components you removed.
12. Replace the diskette drive and cover panels, as described on page Replacing the Diskette Drive to Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
Replacing the Lithium Battery
After several years, when the lithium battery starts to weaken, the system settings stored in CMOS RAM, such as the date and time, may be wrong. When this occurs, you need to replace the lithium battery.
To replace the lithium battery
1. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
2. Write down the current BIOS Setup options. Page 1057
3. Shut down your computer and turn off all peripheral devices, such as your printer, display, and speakers. Unplug your computer.
4. Remove the left-side and bottom panels, as described on pages Removing the Left-Side Panel through Removing the Bottom Panel, respectively.
5. Install the new battery with the plus (+) side up.
There is danger of explosion if you replace the battery incorrectly. You must replace the battery only with a CR2032 type lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the instructions on On Disposal of the Lithium Battery.
6. Replace the bottom and left-side panels, as described on pages Replacing the Bottom Panel and Replacing the Left-Side Panel, respectively.
The values stored in the CMOS memory are now reset to the factory default values. You must run the Setup utility to reset the date, time, passwords, and other options. See the VAIO MicroTower Reference Manual for details.
7. To run the Setup utility, press F3 when your computer is starting up. Then press F1 to run the BIOS setup utility.
8. Change the default values to the values you wrote down in step 2.
9. Save your Setup changes, and then exit the Setup utility.
Installing an Internal Hard Disk Drive
Your VAIO MicroTower comes with an available bay to hold an additional hard disk drive. The drive you install must not require front panel access. The hard disk drive access light blinks when either internal drive is active.
Before opening the system unit, save any open files, exit Windows, turn off the power of the computer and all attached peripherals, and then unplug the power cord.
1. Configure the jumpers on the new drive as a secondary master (see your drive's documentation Page 1058
for configuration instructions).
2. Remove the left-side panel, as described on page Removing the Left-Side Panel.
3. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
4. Remove the bottom panel, as described on page Removing the Bottom Panel.
5. Lay the system on its right side (left side faces up-see diagram that follows).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the drive holder.
7. Slide the drive holder forward and then out.
Page 1059
8. Place the drive holder upside down on top of the power supply.
9. Slide the new drive into the drive holder and align the holes on each side of the drive bay.
Page 1060
10. Secure the drive to the drive holder using any two of the three holes on each side of the drive holder (screws are provided with the new drive). Do not overtighten the screws.
11. Connect the second drive connector to the new drive.
12. Connect the second power connector to the new drive.
13. Place the drive holder against the inside of the front chassis and slide it back. Be sure to align the slots on the drive holder with the tabs on the inside of the chassis. Be sure to slide the drive holder back so that the tabs slip into the notch at the bottom of the slot.
Page 1061
14. Replace the two screws that secure the holder to the chassis.
15. Replace the bottom panel, as described on page Replacing the Bottom Panel.
16. Replace the front panel, as described on page Replacing the Front Panel.
17. Replace the left-side panel, as described on page Replacing the Left-Side Panel.
18. Reconnect the power cord and then turn on your computer.
Your computer automatically recognizes the new drive and configures itself accordingly when you turn it on. Format and partition the new drive following the instructions provided with the drive.
Removing the Left-Side Panel
To remove the left-side panel
1. Remove the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
2. Slide the panel back until it stops.
3. Pull the panel straight out to remove it. Page 1062
Removing the Bottom Panel
To remove the bottom panel
1. Remove the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
2. Pull the bottom panel straight out to remove it.
Page 1063
Removing the Front Panel
To remove the front panel
1. Open the CD tray by inserting a thin, pointed object into the emergency eject opening.
2. Slide the CD tray forward.
3. Remove the front cover of the CD tray by lifting it upwards.
4. Press down on each of the two tabs on the bottom of the front panel to release the panel.
5. Pull the front panel forward to remove it.
Page 1064
Detaching the Diskette Drive
To detach the diskette drive
1. Remove the front panel, as described on page Removing the Front Panel.
2. Remove the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Pull the diskette drive forward.
If you are adding memory, you do not need to completely remove the diskette drive or disconnect the cable. Page 1065
Replacing the Diskette Drive
To replace the diskette drive
1. Push the diskette drive straight into the drive slot.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the diskette drive to the front of the chassis.
3. Replace the front panel, as described in Replacing the Front Panel.
Replacing the Bottom Panel
To replace the bottom panel
1. Align the bottom panel with the screw hole on the bottom of the chassis.
2. Replace the screw that secures the bottom panel to the chassis.
Page 1066
Replacing the Front Panel
To replace the front panel
1. Push the front panel straight onto the front of the chassis until it clicks into place.
2. Replace the front cover of the CD tray by sliding it down onto the front of the open tray.
3. Close the CD tray. Page 1067
Replacing the Left-Side Panel
To replace the left-side panel
1. Slide the panel forward until it stops.
2. Replace the two screws that secure the panel to the chassis.
Page 1068
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1069
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1070
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1071
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1072
Page 1073
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1074
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1075
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1076
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1077
Page 1078
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1079
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1080
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1081
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1082
Page 1083
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1084
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1085
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1086
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1087
Page 1088
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1089
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1090
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1091
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1092
Page 1093
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1094
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1095
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1096
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1097
Page 1098
Computer Basics
Using the Keyboard
Your keyboard is very similar to a typewriter's, but the keyboard has additional buttons that perform specific computer-related tasks.
Key Description Programmable buttons The six programmable buttons along the top of the keyboard are preprogrammed to perform specific functions. To change the function of these buttons, see Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons. Standby button The Standby button switches the computer to standby mode. For details, see Using the Standby Mode. Numeric keypad Contains the keys found on a typical calculator. Use the numeric keypad to type numbers or to perform mathematical calculations such as addition and subtraction. Note that you must press NUM LOCK to activate the numeric keypad. (When you do so, the Num Lock light will be on.) Navigation keys Several keys are devoted to moving the cursor on the screen (the four arrow keys and the HOME, END, PAGE UP, and PAGE DOWN keys). These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Correction keys The INSERT and DELETE keys enable you to make corrections in your documents. These keys are also available on the numeric keypad when Num Lock is turned off. Function keys The twelve function keys along the top of the keyboard are used to perform designated tasks. For example, in many applications, F1 is the Help key. The task associated with each function key may vary from one application to the next. Escape keys The ESC (Escape) key is used to cancel commands. Print Screen keysThe PRINT SCREEN key takes an electronic snapshot of the screen and places it in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the screen shot into a document and print it. Operator keys Several keys are always used with at least one other key: CTRL, ALT, and SHIFT. When held down with another keys, the CTRL (Control) and ALT (Alternate) keys offer another way to give commands. For example, in many applications, instead of choosing the Save command from a menu, you can hold down CTRL and press S (referred to as CTRL+S). The SHIFT key operates the same way as on a typewriter; it is used to produce capital letters or special symbols such as @ and $. Windows keys The keys with the Windows logo display the Windows Start menu; it is the equivalent of clicking the Start key on the taskbar. The Applications key displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices; pressing this key is the equivalent of clicking the right mouse button.
The keyboard also has three lights:
Light On Off Num Lock The number keys on the numeric keypad are active. The arrow keys, navigation keys, and correction keys on the keypad are active. Page 1099
Cap Lock Letters appear in uppercase as you type. The SHIFT key lowers the case of typed letters when Cap Lock is on. Letters appear in lower case as you type (unless you hold down the SHIFT key). Scroll Lock The screen scrolls differently. (Exactly how it scrolls depends on the specific application. It has no effect in many applications.) Information moves across the display normally.
Changing the Function of the Programmable Buttons
You can change the function of the programmable buttons as follows:
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar to open the Start menu.
2. Point to Programs and click VAIO Smart Keyboard.
Alternatively, you can click the VAIO Smart Keyboard icon in the Windows task tray.
3. Click the on-screen button that represents the button on the keyboard (S1 to S6) that you want to program.
4. Complete the Customization dialog box to specify the function and label you want to assign to the button. Then click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop any Windows icon that represents the function you want to assign onto the on-screen button. However, you cannot drag and drop icons that are specific to the Windows operating system, such as My Computer.
5. Close the Customization dialog box.
Using the Mouse
Using a mouse may be difficult at first, but after you become comfortable using it, you can save a lot of time. The following terms are commonly used to describe actions you perform with a mouse.
Term Description Point Place the mouse pointer on an item or object. Click Press and release the left mouse button, without moving the mouse. Double-clickPress the left mouse button two consecutive times, without moving the mouse. Right-click Press the right mouse button. In many applications, this action displays a shortcut menu of context-sensitive choices. Drag Hold down the left mouse button and then move the mouse in the desired direction. This action is used to select text and move objects.
Page 1100
Setting Up the Mouse for Left-Hand Use
You can control the mouse with your right or left hand. When you use the mouse with your left-hand, you may find it easier to reverse the button functions. When the functions are reversed, the right mouse button is used for normal clicking and dragging, and the left button is for displaying shortcut menus (right-clicking).
To set up the mouse for left-hand use
1. Click the Start button to display the Start menu.
2. Point to Settings.
3. Click Control Panel.
4. Double-click the Mouse icon.
5. Click the Buttons tab.
6. Under Buttons, select Left-handed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Mouse Properties dialog box.
Using the DVD-ROM Drive
To use the drive
1. Press the Eject button on the front panel of the computer. The tray slides out.
2. Place the disc in the tray.
Place CD-ROM discs in the tray with the label side facing up. For DVD discs, which can be played on both sides, the side of the disc facing up is the side that plays.
3. Close the tray by pushing it gently or by pressing the Eject button on the front panel.
Page 1101
To open the drive tray after playing a DVD disc, use the Eject button in the DVD Player application. Alternatively, you can click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop, right-click the icon of the disc, and then click Eject.
Using the Diskette Drive
Most diskettes contain a write-protect tab. The write-protect tab prevents accidental changes to a diskette. When the hole is open, the diskette is write-protected--you can't delete, copy, or save information on the diskette. When the hole is closed, you may write to or modify the diskette contents. Just slide the write-protect tab to open and close the hole.
To use the diskette drive
1. Hold the diskette with the label side facing up.
2. Gently push the diskette into the drive until you hear it click into place.
3. After you finish using the diskette, press the Eject button on the diskette drive to remove the diskette.
Page 1102
Page 1103
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1104
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1105
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1106
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1107
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1108
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1109
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1110
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1111
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1112
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1113
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1114
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1115
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1116
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1117
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1118
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1119
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1120
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1121
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1122
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1123
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1124
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1125
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1126
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1127
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1128
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1129
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1130
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1131
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1132
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1133
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1134
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1135
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1136
Other Information
Notes on Use
On the Power Source
Your computer operates on 100-120 V AC 50/60 Hz for North American countries.
The total power draw of installed add-in cards must not exceed the specifications for the power supply. Do not overload the system by installing add-in cards that draw excessive current. The system is designed to provide 2 amps (average) of 5V power for each card in the system not to exceed a total of 12 amps. The total from +5V current draw in a fully-loaded system (with all the add-in card slots filled) must not exceed 12 amps. If you add components to the system that draw current from the power supply, the maximum combined +3.3V and +5V output must not exceed 80 watts.
Plug all the power cords for your computer and its peripheral equipment into the same AC supply line. AC derived from different supply lines may result in voltage differences that can cause unstable operation or unwanted weak currents at the time of connection.
Do not share the AC outlet with any other power-consuming equipment, such as copying machines or shredders.
You can purchase a power strip with a surge protector. This device prevents damage to your computer caused by sudden power surges such as those that may occur during an electrical storm.
If you live in an area that experiences frequent power fluctuations, you may want to purchase a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply). This device contains both a surge protector and a battery backup. The surge protector prevents damage to your computer caused by power surges. The battery backup safeguards your data during a brief period of power loss.
Do not place heavy objects on the power cord.
Do not operate the system with the cover removed. Always reinstall the cover before turning on the system.
To disconnect the cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the cord itself.
Unplug your computer from the wall outlet if you will not be using the computer for a long time.
The power control button on the front panel does not turn off the system AC power. To remove power from the system, you must shut down the computer as described in this manual and then unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet or power strip.
Before touching anything inside the computer, turn the system off and let it cool for ten minutes. This will ensure that the processor heat sink will not be hot.
Do not attempt to open the power supply. There are no user-serviceable parts in the power supply. To avoid personal injury or damage to your equipment, refer the repair or replacement of the power supply to qualified personnel only.
On Disposal of the Lithium Battery
Dispose of the lithium battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of lithium batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. You can return your unwanted lithium batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Factory Service Center. For the Sony Service Center nearest you, call 1-888-4SONY-PC (1-888-476-6972).
Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium batteries.
The lithium battery may explode if mistreated. Do not disassemble it or dispose of it in fire. Page 1137
Replace the battery with a Sony CR2032 lithium battery. Using a type of battery other than a CR2032 may present a risk of fire or explosion.
On Handling
Clean the cabinet with a soft, dry cloth or a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder, or solvent such as alcohol or benzine, as it may damage the finish of your Sony computer.
Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, keyboard, or mouse, shut down your computer and then unplug it. You may want to have the computer checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.
On Installation
Do not place your Sony computer in a location subject to:
o Heat sources, such as radiators or air ducts
o Direct sunlight
o Excessive dust
o Mechanical vibration or shock
o Strong magnets or speakers that are not magnetically shielded
o Ambient temperature of more than 95F (35C) or less than 50F (10C)
o High humidity, moisture, or rain
Do not place electronic equipment near your computer. The computer's electromagnetic field may cause a malfunction.
Provide adequate air circulation to prevent internal heat build-up. Do not place your computer on loose surfaces (such as rugs or blankets) or near materials (such as curtains or draperies) that may block its ventilation slots. Leave a space of at least 8 inches from the back panel of your computer.
The computer uses high-frequency radio signals and may cause interference to radio or TV reception. Should this occur, relocate the computer a suitable distance away from the set.
Use only specified peripheral equipment and interface cables; otherwise, problems may result.
Do not use cut or damaged connection cables.
Always switch the power off before connecting your computer to peripheral equipment; otherwise, damage may occur to the integrated circuits in your computer.
Your computer, keyboard, and mouse consist of high-precision electronic parts. Do not drop them or bump them against other objects.
Your Sony computer will not work with party lines, cannot be connected to a coin-operated telephone, and may not work with multiple phone lines or a private branch exchange (PBX).
If the telephone company makes a service call to your home or office and determines that your computer is responsible for the problem, the telephone company may bill you for the service call. Also, if you do not disconnect your computer when it is adversely affecting the telephone line, the telephone company has the right to disconnect your service until you correct the problem.
On Moisture Condensation
If your computer is brought directly from a cold location to a warm one, moisture may condense inside your computer. In this case, allow at least an hour before turning on your computer. If anyP ge 1138
problem occurs, unplug your computer, and contact your Sony Service Center.
On Upgrading the System
The procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter of this manual assume familiarity with the general terminology associated with personal computers and with the safety practices and regulatory compliance required for using and modifying electronic equipment.
Disconnect the system from its power source and from any telecommunications links, networks, or modems before you open the system or do any of the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower section in this manual. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage disk drives, add-in cards, and other components. Do the procedures described in the Upgrading and Maintaining Your VAIO MicroTower chapter only at an ESD workstation. If such a station is not available, do not work in a carpeted area, and do not handle materials that produce or hold static electricity (cellophane wrappers, for example). Ground yourself by maintaining contact with an unpainted metal portion of the chassis while performing the procedure.
When removing a slot cover, be careful not to damage components on the system board or add-in cards. You may need to temporarily remove add-in cards that are next to the slot cover you want to remove.
On Using the Hard Disk Drive
Do not place the computer in a location that is subject to vibration or shock.
Do not move the computer during operation.
Do not subject the computer to sudden changes in temperature.
Do not turn off the power while the computer is accessing the hard disk drive.
On Handling Diskettes
Do not open the shutter manually and touch the surface of the diskette.
Keep diskettes away from magnets.
Keep diskettes away from direct sunlight and other heat sources.
On Handling CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Do not touch the surface of the disc.
Do not drop or bend the disc.
On Cleaning CD-ROM and DVD-ROM Discs
Fingerprints and dust on the surface of a disc may cause read errors. Proper care of the disc is essential to maintain its reliability. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners or anti-static spray, as they may cause damage to the disc.
For normal cleaning, hold the disc by its edge and use a soft cloth to wipe the surface from the center out.
If the disc is badly soiled, moisten a soft cloth with water, wring it out well, and use it to wipe the surface of the disc from the center out. Wipe off any remaining moisture with a dry soft cloth.
Page 1139
Limited Warranty Statement The limited warranty on your VAIO MicroTower covers parts and labor against defects in material or workmanship for a period of three months from the original date of purchase. You can extend the warranty period for an additional nine months by registering your computer. See Registering Your Computer. Once you register your computer, the limited warranty period is twelve months from the original date of purchase.
SONY ELECTRONICS INC. ("SONY") warrants this computer hardware product ("the Product") against defects in material or workmanship as follows:
Labor: For a period of ninety (90) calendar days from the original date of purchase from SONY or a SONY authorized reseller, SONY will repair defects in the Product at no charge, or pay the associated labor charges to a SONY authorized personal computer service facility. The ninety (90) day warranty period is extendible only to the original purchaser, for an additional period of nine (9) months, for a total of twelve (12) months from date of purchase when the Product is registered electronically. After the applicable period you must pay for all labor charges.
Parts: For a period of ninety (90) calendar days from the original date of purchase from SONY or a SONY authorized reseller, SONY will supply, at no charge, new or rebuilt, at SONY's option, replacement parts in exchange for defective parts. Any replacement parts will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) calendar days from installation by SONY's authorized personal computer service facility, whichever is longer. The ninety (90) day warranty period is extendible only to the original purchaser, for an additional period of nine (9) months, for a total of twelve (12) months from date of purchase when the Product is registered electronically. All defective parts replaced under this Limited Warranty will become the property of SONY.
This Limited Warranty covers only the hardware components packaged with the Product. It does not cover technical assistance for hardware or software usage and it does not cover any software products whether or not contained in the Product; any such software is provided "AS IS" unless expressly provided for in any enclosed software limited warranty. Please refer to the End User License Agreements included with the Product for your obligations with respect to the software.
This Limited Warranty is non-transferable.
Proof of purchase in the form of a bill of sale (which is evidence that the Product is within the warranty period) must be presented to obtain warranty service. In addition, if replacement parts are required and you wish to receive the most expedient service available, you will be required to provide SONY with a credit card authorization to bill your credit card in the event you fail to return the original parts in the postage-paid envelope we provide. The credit card will only be charged for SONY's list price for the part if the part has not been returned within thirty days.
If you purchased the Product in the United States and the Product is located in the United States, you may be entitled to on-site repair service during the warranty period, subject to certain restrictions. In all instances, however, prior to an on-site service call being provided, you must communicate with Sony sufficiently to allow it to perform initial diagnostics of your Product. Please contact SONY as set forth below for further information.
If you do not qualify for on-site warranty service or choose not to take advantage of any applicable on-site warranty service, you must take the Product, or deliver the Product freight prepaid, in either its original package or packaging providing the Product with a degree of protection equivalent to that of the original packaging, to any SONY authorized personal computer service facility. Please contact SONY as set forth below for further information.
With respect to all service provided, it is your responsibility to backup the contents of your hard drive, including any data you have stored or software you have installed on the hard drive. It is likely that the contents of your hard drive will be lost or reformatted in the course of service and SONY will not be responsible for any damage to or loss of any programs, data or other information stored on any media or any part of any Product serviced hereunder.
IF DURING THE REPAIR OF THE PRODUCT THE CONTENTS OF THE HARD DRIVE ARE ALTERED, DELETED, OR IN ANY WAY MODIFIED, SONY IS NOT RESPONSBILE WHATSOEVER. YOUR PRODUCTPage 1140
WILL BE RETURNED TO YOU CONFIGURED AS ORIGINALLY PURCHASED (SUBJECT TO AVAILABILITY OF SOFTWARE).
Be sure to remove all third party hardware, software, features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not warranted by SONY prior to sending the product to SONY for service. SONY is not liable for any loss or damage to these items.
This Limited Warranty does not cover any consumable items (such as batteries) supplied with this Product; cosmetic damages; damage or loss to any software programs, data, or removable storage media; or damage due to (1) acts of God, accident, misuse, abuse, negligence, commercial use or modifications of this Product; (2) improper operation or maintenance of this Product; (3) connection to improper voltage supply; or (4) attempted repair by any party other than a SONY authorized personal computer service facility. This Limited Warranty does not apply when the malfunction results from the use of this Product in conjunction with accessories, products or ancillary or peripheral equipment, or where it is determined by SONY that there is no fault with this Product itself. This Limited Warranty is valid only in the United States of America.
This Limited Warranty is invalid if the factory applied serial number has been altered or removed from the Product.
Repair or replacement of defective parts or hardware as provided under this Limited Warranty is the exclusive remedy of the consumer. SONY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THIS PRODUCT. SUCH DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT, DOWN TIME AND PURCHASER'S TIME. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ON THIS PRODUCT IS LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may have other rights which vary from state to state.
Technical Support: Although technical support is not provided free of charge under this Limited Warranty, SONY has established a telephone number for technical support. Charges may apply for technical support, unless and to the extent that free technical support for a limited period is provided in writing as a feature of your Product. Prior to placing your call, please have available the model and serial number for your Product, date of purchase, a list of all options installed in your Product and a detailed description of the problem.
For Product support, on-line knowledge base, frequently asked questions, and free updates via the Internet: http:
Related manuals for Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the PCV-E308DS Sony works, you can view and download the Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the User's Guide for Sony PCV-E308DS as well as other Sony manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The User's Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Sony PCV-E308DS. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Sony PCV-E308DS v2 User's Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.